TCL / TCM Series Tri-rod Cylinder

Show previous products

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X25-75S

  Specifications: TCLJ50X25-75S is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 25 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke -75 75 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet (blank thread) PT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model PT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 75 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P PT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 101 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 69 mm PE + stroke 34 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 139 mm AG + adjustment 104 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 9.17 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each PT1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment; also connects the selected valve A/B work ports PTL1002A: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeAlternative cylinder-port meter-out speed controller for the same tube OD PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A air-pilot port when its pilot line uses 10 mm OD tubing US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seal tapered PT connections correctly. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2514 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $249.48

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X40-75SG

  Specifications: TCLJ50X40-75SG is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 40 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X40 40 mm stroke -75 75 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet G G thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model G1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 75 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P G1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 116 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 84 mm PE + stroke 49 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 154 mm AG + adjustment 104 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 8.3 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses G1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each G1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. GPC1002: G1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment GPTL1002A: G1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeCylinder-port meter-out controller instead of the straight fitting PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B work ports PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A pilot port when its line uses this exact metric tube OD US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seat the G sealing gasket on a suitable flat port face; PT/NPT are not substitutes. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2847 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $258.93

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X70-75S

  Specifications: TCLJ50X70-75S is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 70 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X70 70 mm stroke -75 75 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet (blank thread) PT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model PT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 75 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P PT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 188 mm DA 46 mm MC 48 mm KC 48 mm AC + stroke 114 mm PE + stroke 79 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 184 mm AG + adjustment 104 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 9.94 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each PT1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment; also connects the selected valve A/B work ports PTL1002A: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeAlternative cylinder-port meter-out speed controller for the same tube OD PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A air-pilot port when its pilot line uses 10 mm OD tubing US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seal tapered PT connections correctly. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 3736 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $290.03

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X40-50S

  Specifications: TCLJ50X40-50S is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 40 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X40 40 mm stroke -50 50 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet (blank thread) PT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model PT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 50 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P PT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 116 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 84 mm PE + stroke 49 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 129 mm AG + adjustment 79 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 8.3 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each PT1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment; also connects the selected valve A/B work ports PTL1002A: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeAlternative cylinder-port meter-out speed controller for the same tube OD PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A air-pilot port when its pilot line uses 10 mm OD tubing US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seal tapered PT connections correctly. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2847 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $258.93

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X25-50ST

  Specifications: TCLJ50X25-50ST is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 25 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke -50 50 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet T NPT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model NPT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 50 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P NPT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 101 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 69 mm PE + stroke 34 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 114 mm AG + adjustment 79 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 9.17 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 10 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B work ports PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A pilot port when its line uses this exact metric tube OD US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Catalog listing does not establish current stock. The following complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2514 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $249.48

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X30-40ST

  Specifications: TCLJ50X30-40ST is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 30 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke -40 40 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet T NPT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model NPT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 40 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P NPT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 106 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 74 mm PE + stroke 39 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 109 mm AG + adjustment 69 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 8.75 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 10 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B work ports PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A pilot port when its line uses this exact metric tube OD US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Catalog listing does not establish current stock. The following complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2625 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $253.04

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X30-75S

  Specifications: TCLJ50X30-75S is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 30 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke -75 75 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet (blank thread) PT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model PT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 75 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P PT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 106 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 74 mm PE + stroke 39 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 144 mm AG + adjustment 104 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 8.75 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each PT1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment; also connects the selected valve A/B work ports PTL1002A: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeAlternative cylinder-port meter-out speed controller for the same tube OD PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A air-pilot port when its pilot line uses 10 mm OD tubing US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seal tapered PT connections correctly. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2625 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $253.04

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X40-50ST

  Specifications: TCLJ50X40-50ST is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 40 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X40 40 mm stroke -50 50 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet T NPT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model NPT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 50 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P NPT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 116 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 84 mm PE + stroke 49 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 129 mm AG + adjustment 79 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 8.3 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 10 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B work ports PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A pilot port when its line uses this exact metric tube OD US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Catalog listing does not establish current stock. The following complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2847 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $258.93

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X30-40S

  Specifications: TCLJ50X30-40S is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 30 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke -40 40 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet (blank thread) PT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model PT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 40 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P PT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 106 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 74 mm PE + stroke 39 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 109 mm AG + adjustment 69 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 8.75 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each PT1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment; also connects the selected valve A/B work ports PTL1002A: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeAlternative cylinder-port meter-out speed controller for the same tube OD PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A air-pilot port when its pilot line uses 10 mm OD tubing US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seal tapered PT connections correctly. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2625 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $253.04

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X40-50SG

  Specifications: TCLJ50X40-50SG is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 40 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X40 40 mm stroke -50 50 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet G G thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model G1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 50 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P G1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 116 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 84 mm PE + stroke 49 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 129 mm AG + adjustment 79 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 8.3 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses G1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each G1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. GPC1002: G1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment GPTL1002A: G1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeCylinder-port meter-out controller instead of the straight fitting PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B work ports PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A pilot port when its line uses this exact metric tube OD US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seat the G sealing gasket on a suitable flat port face; PT/NPT are not substitutes. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2847 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $258.93

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X25-40S

  Specifications: TCLJ50X25-40S is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 25 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke -40 40 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet (blank thread) PT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model PT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 40 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P PT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 101 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 69 mm PE + stroke 34 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 104 mm AG + adjustment 69 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 9.17 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each PT1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment; also connects the selected valve A/B work ports PTL1002A: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeAlternative cylinder-port meter-out speed controller for the same tube OD PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A air-pilot port when its pilot line uses 10 mm OD tubing US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seal tapered PT connections correctly. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2514 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $249.48

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X25-50SG

  Specifications: TCLJ50X25-50SG is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 25 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke -50 50 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet G G thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model G1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 50 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P G1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 101 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 69 mm PE + stroke 34 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 114 mm AG + adjustment 79 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 9.17 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses G1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each G1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. GPC1002: G1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment GPTL1002A: G1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeCylinder-port meter-out controller instead of the straight fitting PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B work ports PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A pilot port when its line uses this exact metric tube OD US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seat the G sealing gasket on a suitable flat port face; PT/NPT are not substitutes. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2514 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $249.48

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X25-50S

  Specifications: TCLJ50X25-50S is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 25 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke -50 50 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet (blank thread) PT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model PT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 50 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P PT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 101 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 69 mm PE + stroke 34 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 114 mm AG + adjustment 79 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 9.17 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each PT1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment; also connects the selected valve A/B work ports PTL1002A: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeAlternative cylinder-port meter-out speed controller for the same tube OD PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A air-pilot port when its pilot line uses 10 mm OD tubing US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seal tapered PT connections correctly. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2514 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $249.48

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X30-50S

  Specifications: TCLJ50X30-50S is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 30 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke -50 50 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet (blank thread) PT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model PT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 50 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P PT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 106 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 74 mm PE + stroke 39 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 119 mm AG + adjustment 79 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 8.75 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each PT1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment; also connects the selected valve A/B work ports PTL1002A: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeAlternative cylinder-port meter-out speed controller for the same tube OD PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A air-pilot port when its pilot line uses 10 mm OD tubing US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seal tapered PT connections correctly. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2625 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $253.04

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X25-40SG

  Specifications: TCLJ50X25-40SG is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 25 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke -40 40 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet G G thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model G1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 40 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P G1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 101 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 69 mm PE + stroke 34 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 104 mm AG + adjustment 69 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 9.17 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses G1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each G1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. GPC1002: G1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment GPTL1002A: G1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeCylinder-port meter-out controller instead of the straight fitting PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B work ports PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A pilot port when its line uses this exact metric tube OD US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seat the G sealing gasket on a suitable flat port face; PT/NPT are not substitutes. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2514 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $249.48

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X30-40SG

  Specifications: TCLJ50X30-40SG is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 30 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke -40 40 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet G G thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model G1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 40 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P G1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 106 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 74 mm PE + stroke 39 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 109 mm AG + adjustment 69 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 8.75 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses G1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each G1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. GPC1002: G1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment GPTL1002A: G1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeCylinder-port meter-out controller instead of the straight fitting PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B work ports PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A pilot port when its line uses this exact metric tube OD US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seat the G sealing gasket on a suitable flat port face; PT/NPT are not substitutes. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2625 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $253.04

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ40X30-100ST

  Specifications: TCLJ40X30-100ST is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 40 mm bore and 30 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 40 40 mm bore X30 30 mm stroke -100 100 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet T NPT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.06°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model NPT1/8 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 100 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 22 mm AD 12 mm B 120 mm BA 118 mm C 54 mm CA 44 mm DB 16 mm G 86 mm J 4.5 mm JA 3 mm K 4 mm KA 6 mm KB 50 mm L M8 × 1.25 LA 20 mm LB 106 mm LC 40 mm LD 104 mm LE 30 mm M 11 mm MA 7.5 mm MB 22 mm N 6.5 mm P NPT1/8 PA 18 mm PB 38 mm PC 14 mm PD 14 mm PF 10 mm R M8 × 1.25 RA 16 mm S 72 mm U 10.5 mm V 6.5 mm W 5.5 mm X 4 mm Y 11 mm D (guide rod) 16 mm A + stroke 96 mm DA 0 mm MC 24 mm KC 34 mm AC + stroke 74 mm PE + stroke 43 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 8 mm BD 119.5 mm CD 53.5 mm FA 7 mm H 17 mm T 32 mm Z M12 × 1.25 AF + stroke + adjustment 166 mm AG + adjustment 128 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 5.94 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 1/4 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC1/4-1/8: NPT1/8 male × exact 1/4 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL1/4-1/8A: NPT1/8 male × exact 1/4 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.08 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Catalog listing does not establish current stock. The following complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 1606 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $209.61

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X25-30ST

  Specifications: TCLJ50X25-30ST is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 25 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke -30 30 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet T NPT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model NPT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 30 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P NPT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 101 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 69 mm PE + stroke 34 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 94 mm AG + adjustment 59 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 9.17 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 3/8 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 10 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC3/8-1/4: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL3/8-1/4A: NPT1/4 male × exact 3/8 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B work ports PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A pilot port when its line uses this exact metric tube OD US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Catalog listing does not establish current stock. The following complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2514 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $249.48

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ40X60-100SG

  Specifications: TCLJ40X60-100SG is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 40 mm bore and 60 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 40 40 mm bore X60 60 mm stroke -100 100 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet G G thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.06°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model G1/8 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 100 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 22 mm AD 12 mm B 120 mm BA 118 mm C 54 mm CA 44 mm DB 16 mm G 86 mm J 4.5 mm JA 3 mm K 4 mm KA 6 mm KB 50 mm L M8 × 1.25 LA 20 mm LB 106 mm LC 40 mm LD 104 mm LE 30 mm M 11 mm MA 7.5 mm MB 22 mm N 6.5 mm P G1/8 PA 18 mm PB 38 mm PC 14 mm PD 14 mm PF 10 mm R M8 × 1.25 RA 16 mm S 72 mm U 10.5 mm V 6.5 mm W 5.5 mm X 4 mm Y 11 mm D (guide rod) 16 mm A + stroke 162 mm DA 36 mm MC 48 mm KC 46 mm AC + stroke 104 mm PE + stroke 73 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 8 mm BD 119.5 mm CD 53.5 mm FA 7 mm H 17 mm T 32 mm Z M12 × 1.25 AF + stroke + adjustment 196 mm AG + adjustment 128 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 5.99 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses G1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each G1/8 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. GPC801: G1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment GPTL801A: G1/8 male × 8 mm tube OD; A-typeCylinder-port meter-out controller instead of the straight fitting PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction Fittings/controllers accept exact 8 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.08 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seat the G sealing gasket on a suitable flat port face; PT/NPT are not substitutes. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2282 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $248.24

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X25-30S

  Specifications: TCLJ50X25-30S is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 25 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke -30 30 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet (blank thread) PT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model PT1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 30 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P PT1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 101 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 69 mm PE + stroke 34 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 94 mm AG + adjustment 59 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 9.17 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses PT1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each PT1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment; also connects the selected valve A/B work ports PTL1002A: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeAlternative cylinder-port meter-out speed controller for the same tube OD PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A air-pilot port when its pilot line uses 10 mm OD tubing US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seal tapered PT connections correctly. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2514 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $249.48

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ50X25-30SG

  Specifications: TCLJ50X25-30SG is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 50 mm bore and 25 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 50 50 mm bore X25 25 mm stroke -30 30 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet G G thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.05°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model G1/4 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 30 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 28 mm AD 16 mm B 148 mm BA 146 mm C 64 mm CA 60 mm DB 20 mm G 110 mm J 6 mm JA 4 mm K 5 mm KA 8 mm KB 66 mm L M10 × 1.5 LA 22 mm LB 130 mm LC 46 mm LD 130 mm LE 40 mm M 14 mm MA 9 mm MB 24 mm N 8.5 mm P G1/4 PA 21.5 mm PB 47 mm PC 12 mm PD 14 mm PF 11 mm R M10 × 1.5 RA 20 mm S 92 mm U 13.5 mm V 8.5 mm W 7.5 mm X 4.5 mm Y 13.5 mm D (guide rod) 20 mm A + stroke 101 mm DA 4 mm MC 24 mm KC 36 mm AC + stroke 69 mm PE + stroke 34 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 10 mm BD 147 mm CD 63 mm FA 8 mm H 23 mm T 36 mm Z M16 × 1.5 AF + stroke + adjustment 94 mm AG + adjustment 59 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 9.17 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 50 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 5.1 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses G1/4; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V21008 / 5V22008 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A21008 / 4A22008 Flow control / silencer example PTL02 / BSL02 Tube outside / inside diameter 10 / 6.5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls Choose the listed straight fitting or A-type controller at each G1/4 cylinder chamber port and the specified straight fittings at the separate valve A/B ports; keep both chamber lines separate. The A-type restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging. GPC1002: G1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight cylinder-port connection; no speed adjustment GPTL1002A: G1/4 male × 10 mm tube OD; A-typeCylinder-port meter-out controller instead of the straight fitting PC1002: PT1/4 male × 10 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B work ports PC1001: PT1/8 male × 10 mm tube ODOnly for the separate 4A pilot port when its line uses this exact metric tube OD US98A100065100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A100065100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 10 mm OD × 6.5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V21008A050, 5V21008A200, 5V22008A050, 5V22008A200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008B050, 5V21008B200, 5V22008B050, 5V22008B200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008C050, 5V21008C200, 5V22008C050, 5V22008C200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008E050, 5V21008E200, 5V22008E050, 5V22008E200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V21008F050, 5V21008F200, 5V22008F050, 5V22008F200: PT1/4 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction BSL01: PT1/8 maleSilencer at the selected 5V200 or 4A200 valve exhaust ports R/S Fittings/controllers accept exact 10 mm OD soft nylon/PU tubing at 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Recommended cap-rotation torque is 0.16 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Seat the G sealing gasket on a suitable flat port face; PT/NPT are not substitutes. 5V210 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V220 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A21008/4A22008 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 10 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. BSL02 has a PT1/4 thread and does not fit these PT1/8 valve exhaust ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 25/20 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2514 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $249.48

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ40X50-100ST

  Specifications: TCLJ40X50-100ST is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 40 mm bore and 50 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 40 40 mm bore X50 50 mm stroke -100 100 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet T NPT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.06°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model NPT1/8 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 100 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 22 mm AD 12 mm B 120 mm BA 118 mm C 54 mm CA 44 mm DB 16 mm G 86 mm J 4.5 mm JA 3 mm K 4 mm KA 6 mm KB 50 mm L M8 × 1.25 LA 20 mm LB 106 mm LC 40 mm LD 104 mm LE 30 mm M 11 mm MA 7.5 mm MB 22 mm N 6.5 mm P NPT1/8 PA 18 mm PB 38 mm PC 14 mm PD 14 mm PF 10 mm R M8 × 1.25 RA 16 mm S 72 mm U 10.5 mm V 6.5 mm W 5.5 mm X 4 mm Y 11 mm D (guide rod) 16 mm A + stroke 116 mm DA 0 mm MC 48 mm KC 46 mm AC + stroke 94 mm PE + stroke 63 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 8 mm BD 119.5 mm CD 53.5 mm FA 7 mm H 17 mm T 32 mm Z M12 × 1.25 AF + stroke + adjustment 186 mm AG + adjustment 128 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 5.09 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 1/4 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC1/4-1/8: NPT1/8 male × exact 1/4 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL1/4-1/8A: NPT1/8 male × exact 1/4 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.08 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Catalog listing does not establish current stock. The following complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 1902 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $219.47

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ40X70-100ST

  Specifications: TCLJ40X70-100ST is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 40 mm bore and 70 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 40 40 mm bore X70 70 mm stroke -100 100 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet T NPT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.06°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model NPT1/8 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 100 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 22 mm AD 12 mm B 120 mm BA 118 mm C 54 mm CA 44 mm DB 16 mm G 86 mm J 4.5 mm JA 3 mm K 4 mm KA 6 mm KB 50 mm L M8 × 1.25 LA 20 mm LB 106 mm LC 40 mm LD 104 mm LE 30 mm M 11 mm MA 7.5 mm MB 22 mm N 6.5 mm P NPT1/8 PA 18 mm PB 38 mm PC 14 mm PD 14 mm PF 10 mm R M8 × 1.25 RA 16 mm S 72 mm U 10.5 mm V 6.5 mm W 5.5 mm X 4 mm Y 11 mm D (guide rod) 16 mm A + stroke 172 mm DA 36 mm MC 48 mm KC 46 mm AC + stroke 114 mm PE + stroke 83 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 8 mm BD 119.5 mm CD 53.5 mm FA 7 mm H 17 mm T 32 mm Z M12 × 1.25 AF + stroke + adjustment 206 mm AG + adjustment 128 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 5.67 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 1/4 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC1/4-1/8: NPT1/8 male × exact 1/4 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL1/4-1/8A: NPT1/8 male × exact 1/4 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.08 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Catalog listing does not establish current stock. The following complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2430 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $252.35

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac TCL series: guided three-rod cylinder - TCLJ40X90-100ST

  Specifications: TCLJ40X90-100ST is a double-acting guided three-rod pneumatic cylinder with a 40 mm bore and 90 mm stroke, using linear ball bearings. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) Download 2022 cylinder installation and weight tables (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model code Code Meaning TC Guided three-rod cylinder L Linear ball bearing J Stroke-adjustable type 40 40 mm bore X90 90 mm stroke -100 100 mm stroke-adjustment specification S With magnet T NPT thread Technical specifications Parameter Details Acting type Double acting Fluid Compressed air filtered through a 40 μm element Operating pressure 0.15–1 MPa Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Temperature −20 to +70 °C Speed range 30–500 mm/s Stroke tolerance 0 / +1.0 mm at stroke ≤100 mm; 0 / +1.5 mm above100 mm Cushioning Bumper Non-rotating accuracy ±0.06°; angular movement of the fixing plate with the cylinder fully retracted Port for the current model NPT1/8 Magnet Standard; non-magnetic configuration is not offered in this ordering table Adjustable-type specification 100 mm; check the adjustment arrangement in the dimension drawing Current-model dimensions All numerical dimensions below are in millimeters. Lettered callouts retain the catalog drawing definitions; do not treat every callout as an overall dimension or mounting-hole pitch. Values containing stroke are evaluated for this model. Parameter Details AB 22 mm AD 12 mm B 120 mm BA 118 mm C 54 mm CA 44 mm DB 16 mm G 86 mm J 4.5 mm JA 3 mm K 4 mm KA 6 mm KB 50 mm L M8 × 1.25 LA 20 mm LB 106 mm LC 40 mm LD 104 mm LE 30 mm M 11 mm MA 7.5 mm MB 22 mm N 6.5 mm P NPT1/8 PA 18 mm PB 38 mm PC 14 mm PD 14 mm PF 10 mm R M8 × 1.25 RA 16 mm S 72 mm U 10.5 mm V 6.5 mm W 5.5 mm X 4 mm Y 11 mm D (guide rod) 16 mm A + stroke 192 mm DA 36 mm MC 48 mm KC 46 mm AC + stroke 134 mm PE + stroke 103 mm K locating hole tolerance +0.02 / 0 mm KB locating-hole pitch tolerance ±0.02 mm AE 8 mm BD 119.5 mm CD 53.5 mm FA 7 mm H 17 mm T 32 mm Z M12 × 1.25 AF + stroke + adjustment 226 mm AG + adjustment 128 mm For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Load and torque selection Parameter Details Maximum allowable torque for this bearing, bore and stroke 5.27 N·m For TCM6/10, use the stroke-specific allowable load in newtons versus offset L in the catalog. For12–100 mm bores, the TCM and TCL load-mass curves are separate: the stated reference is L≤100 mm at400 mm/s. The speed-correction graph gives factors1.5 at200 mm/s,1.0 at400 mm/s and0.5 at500 mm/s. Apply only within this cylinder’s permitted speed range and check the actual load direction. Internal structure and materials 1. Fixing plate: Carbon steel. 2. Guide rod: Medium-carbon steel. 3. Body: Aluminum alloy. 4. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 5. Front cover: Aluminum alloy. 6. Bumper: TPU. 7. Profile O-ring: NBR. 8. Hex-socket bolt: Alloy steel. 9. O-ring: NBR. 10. Bearing: Bearing steel for linear bearing; brass for sliding bearing. 11. C retaining ring: Spring steel. 12. Profile O-ring: NBR. 13. O-ring: NBR. 14. Rear cover: Brass / aluminum alloy. 15. Piston rod: Medium-carbon steel. 16. Piston: Brass / aluminum alloy. 17. Magnet holder: Brass / aluminum alloy. 18. Magnet pad: NBR. 19. Magnet: Rare-earth / plastic magnet. 20. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 21. Hex-socket set screw: Alloy steel. 22. Spacer: Aluminum alloy. Features, mounting and series options The actuator and two guide rods are integrated into one body. The guide arrangement resists rotation, bending and lateral loading. Brass sliding bearings suit applications requiring lateral-load and impact resistance; linear ball bearings suit low-friction motion and higher precision. These are distinct bearing configurations. Air ports are provided in alternative body positions. Use the illustrated top, rear or bottom screw mounting; the bottom T-slot option is shown for12–100 mm bores. Provide the specified clearance for guide-rod travel. The body and fixing plate have locating features for repeatable mounting. Do not disassemble the guide or fixing plate to alter precision fits. All configurations in this ordering table have a magnet. Stroke-adjustable J models are defined for12–63 mm bores; listed adjustment specifications are10,20,30,40,50,75 and100 mm. For a non-standard stroke1–5 mm below the next standard stroke, the catalog permits the same external envelope as that next standard size. For example86 mm uses the90 mm envelope;84 mm differs by6 mm and requires a separately defined non-standard specification. The actual working stroke remains the ordered stroke. Position sensing The dedicated product and sensor selection tables specify G-profile magnetic sensors for this series and size. Select the full sensor order code separately for the required output, voltage, cable and connector; the profile letter does not identify the electrical specification. Sensor switches and separately ordered holders are not included unless the product configuration expressly lists them. Pneumatic circuit selection reference The 2022 selection example for a 40 mm cylinder bore uses a theoretical speed of 500 mm/s and an effective flow area of 3.3 mm². It is a circuit-sizing example, not a guaranteed installed speed or a supplied package. Match the actual cylinder port, valve capacity and tubing. This product uses NPT1/8; a reference accessory with a different thread is not a direct screw-in connection. Parameter Details Single / double solenoid valve example 5V11006 / 5V12006 Single / double air-pilot valve example 4A11006 / 4A12006 Flow control / silencer example PTL01 / BSL01 Tube outside / inside diameter 8 / 5 mm Installation and operating conditions Flush the piping before connection and use clean, conditioned compressed air with the filtration specified for this cylinder. Keep sealant clear of the first 1–2 thread turns. Align the actuator and load; provide protection from moving parts and unexpected motion after a loss or restoration of air or electrical power. Exhaust residual pressure before maintenance or removal. Start with the flow-control valve closed and open gradually to the required speed. Check cushioning against the actual speed, load and stopping energy; a closed-center valve does not guarantee prolonged load holding or precise intermediate stopping. Protect the sliding surfaces, prevent moisture from freezing and keep contaminants out of the ports. Protect stored equipment from corrosion. Follow the dedicated lubrication instructions; where continued lubrication is selected, the general catalog specifies additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil. Optional magnetic sensors and matching cables G-profile: CMSG — standard/A05 reed sensorsTwo-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020, CMSG-030, CMSG-050, CMSG-100, CMSG-M08, CMSG-M08010, CMSG-M08020, CMSG-M08030, CMSG-M12, CMSG-M12010, CMSG-M12020, CMSG-M12030, A05-CMSG-020, A05-CMSG-030, A05-CMSG-050, A05-CMSG-100 G-profile: CMSG — high-temperature reed sensors (final -H suffix)Two-wire reed operation at 5–240 V AC/DC.CMSG-020-H, CMSG-030-H, CMSG-050-H, CMSG-100-H, CMSG-M08-H, CMSG-M08010-H, CMSG-M08020-H, CMSG-M08030-H, CMSG-M12-H, CMSG-M12010-H, CMSG-M12020-H, CMSG-M12030-H G-profile: DMSG — two-wire electronic sensorsTwo-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.DMSG-020, DMSG-030, DMSG-050, DMSG-100, DMSG-M08, DMSG-M08010, DMSG-M08020, DMSG-M08030, DMSG-M12, DMSG-M12010, DMSG-M12020, DMSG-M12030, DMSG-020-W, DMSG-030-W, DMSG-050-W, DMSG-100-W, A05-DMSG-020, A05-DMSG-030, A05-DMSG-050, A05-DMSG-100, A06-DMSG-020, A06-DMSG-030, A06-DMSG-050, A06-DMSG-100 G-profile: DMSG — NPN electronic sensorsNPN three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-N020, DMSG-N030, DMSG-N050, DMSG-N100, DMSG-NM08, DMSG-NM08010, DMSG-NM08020, DMSG-NM08030, DMSG-NM12, DMSG-NM12010, DMSG-NM12020, DMSG-NM12030, DMSG-N020-W, DMSG-N030-W, DMSG-N050-W, DMSG-N100-W G-profile: DMSG — PNP electronic sensorsPNP three-wire output with a 5–30 V DC supply.DMSG-P020, DMSG-P030, DMSG-P050, DMSG-P100, DMSG-PM08, DMSG-PM08010, DMSG-PM08020, DMSG-PM08030, DMSG-PM12, DMSG-PM12010, DMSG-PM12020, DMSG-PM12030, DMSG-P020-W, DMSG-P030-W, DMSG-P050-W, DMSG-P100-W G-profile: EMSG — miniature two-wire sensorsMiniature two-wire electronic operation at 10–28 V DC.EMSG-020, EMSG-030, EMSG-050, EMSG-100, EMSG-M08, EMSG-M08010, EMSG-M08020, EMSG-M08030, EMSG-M12, EMSG-M12010, EMSG-M12020, EMSG-M12030, EMSG-020-W, EMSG-030-W, EMSG-050-W, EMSG-100-W, EMSG-M08-W, EMSG-M08010-W, EMSG-M08020-W, EMSG-M08030-W, EMSG-M12-W, EMSG-M12010-W, EMSG-M12020-W, EMSG-M12030-W, A05-EMSG-020, A05-EMSG-030, A05-EMSG-050, A05-EMSG-100, A06-EMSG-020, A06-EMSG-030, A06-EMSG-050, A06-EMSG-100 Two-wire mating cables (B)For a matching M8 or M12 two-wire male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100, F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100 Three-wire mating cables (C)For a matching M8 or M12 NPN/PNP male sensor; ordered separately.F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100, F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100 The listed options are alternatives, not a required set. A final -H on a CMS order code selects the high-temperature reed version. CMSG reed sensors are limited to 100 mA, 10 W and 200 Hz, with no internal consumption or leakage. Standard/A05 voltage drop is at most 2.5 V at 100 mA DC; versions with the final -H suffix have no residual voltage or indicator LED. Two-wire DMSG and EMSG require 2.5–100 mA loads, up to 2.8 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 3 mA, 3.5 V and 0.06 mA respectively. NPN/PNP DMSG outputs are rated to 30 V / 200 mA, 6 W and 1,000 Hz. Maximum consumption, residual voltage and leakage are 5 mA, 0.7 V and 0.01 mA respectively. Check controller input compatibility as well as load ratings. Sensor and female-cable endings 020/030/050/100 mean 2/3/5/10 m. M08/M12 sensors have M8/M12 male connectors on 0.5 m leads; M08010/M08020/M08030 and M12010/M12020/M12030 give 1/2/3 m leads. Lead length does not depend on cylinder stroke. Match female cables to the male connector size and wire count; direct-lead sensors need none. B pinout: 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−), 3 unused. C pinout: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black output. Check the mating cable and connector ratings separately. A05 flex-resistant robotics cable and A06 oil-resistant flex cable have a recommended minimum bend radius of 19 mm. Both are two-wire direct-lead types, without M8/M12, NPN/PNP or W options; A05-CMSG also excludes the final high-temperature -H suffix. W means waterproof: DMSG-W has direct leads only; the listed EMSG-W options also include connectors. Sensor temperature limits are −10 to +70°C, or −10 to +125°C for CMSG versions with the final -H suffix. The TCL/TCM cylinder remains limited to +70°C. Ordinary, high-temperature and A05 sensors are IP64; W/A06 are IP68. These ratings do not extend to the cylinder, connectors or whole assembly; use their common limits. CMS has no protection circuit; DMS/EMS have reverse-polarity and surge protection, and EMS also has temperature-overload protection. Reed, two-wire electronic, NPN and PNP circuits are not interchangeable. Complete and insulate wiring before powering it; keep it separate from power/high-voltage wiring. For direct leads, connect brown and blue in series with the load on two-wire types; do not connect the switch alone across the supply. On three-wire types, brown is positive supply, blue is negative and black is output; connect an NPN load to positive and a PNP load to negative. Install the selected G-profile sensor in its matching switch groove. Loosen the locking screw so it does not project below the sensor base. Slide the sensor to the required position, then tighten. Set detection at the actuation-range centre. Recommended sensor-screw torque is 0.15–0.20 N·m, never over 0.25 N·m; these are not cylinder mounting torques. Prevent impacts; keep cables free of strain and avoid unnecessary movement or bending. Observe the stated bend-radius guidance for flex-resistant versions, and inspect fixings, cables and indication. Keep ordinary sensors dry and do not immerse waterproof types for long periods. Avoid explosive gas, aggressive chemicals, sudden temperature changes, welding interference and magnetic debris. Provide suitable protection for A05 cables exposed to heat, dust, water or oil, and for A06 cables exposed to weld spatter. Optional air connections, tubing and controls The two NPT cylinder-side options require exact 1/4 inch OD soft nylon/PU tubing. They are separate catalog options, not conversions of the original 8 mm metric circuit reference. The listed metric PU and valve-side fittings below do not fit these inch tube sockets. An inch-tube order code and a compatible metric/inch transition kit are not specified; select compatible tubing and verify every valve-side connection and the complete flow path before assembly. Do not use approximate outside diameters or substitute PT/G threads. NPC1/4-1/8: NPT1/8 male × exact 1/4 inch tube ODIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side straight option; not a metric-reference replacement NPTL1/4-1/8A: NPT1/8 male × exact 1/4 inch tube OD; A-typeIndependent inch-tube cylinder-side meter-out option; not a metric-reference replacement PC801: PT1/8 male × 8 mm tube ODStraight fitting at the reference valve A/B and separate 4A pilot ports when pilot tubing is 8 mm OD US98A080050100MBU: polyester polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length UE95A080050100MBU: polyether polyurethane; 8 mm OD × 5 mm ID; blue, 100 m rollOptional straight tubing example; cut to the required installed length 5V11006A050, 5V11006A200, 5V12006A050, 5V12006A200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version220 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006B050, 5V11006B200, 5V12006B050, 5V12006B200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006C050, 5V11006C200, 5V12006C050, 5V12006C200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version110 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006E050, 5V11006E200, 5V12006E050, 5V12006E200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version24 V AC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction 5V11006F050, 5V11006F200, 5V12006F050, 5V12006F200: PT1/8 female main ports; PT1/8 female exhaust ports; terminal-cable version12 V DC solenoid direction control for extension and retraction The NPT A-type controller restricts cylinder-to-tube exhaust and permits free charging; fitting/controller limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. Use the specified tapered-thread seal and full tube insertion. Maximum controller-cap rotation torque is 0.08 N·m, not thread-tightening torque. Catalog listing does not establish current stock. The following complete valve and metric tube options belong to the original metric reference only. They do not validate a complete inch branch or its speed; the two chamber paths require separately verified connections. 5V110 is single-solenoid spring return; 5V120 is double-solenoid with memory. Final 050/200 selects a 0.5/2 m terminal cable, not a DIN plug. AC tolerance is +15%/−10% (2.0 VA); DC is ±10% (1.6 W). Select the electrical or pneumatic control scheme. The existing 4A11006/4A12006 pneumatic alternatives require one/two external pilot signals through separate PT1/8 pilot ports. The listed pilot fitting assumes 8 mm OD pilot tubing; match both ends and seal the tapered pilot thread. The selected 5V/4A control branch is limited to 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20 to +70°C, subject to temperature derating and the lowest connected-component limit. BSL01 fits these selected valve exhaust ports R/S (PT1/8), not cylinder work ports. Silencer limits are 0–1 MPa and −20 to +70°C. The two blue 100 m tube codes are alternative packaging examples, not required installed lengths. US98A polyester-PU is rated −20 to +70°C; UE95A polyether-PU −40 to +70°C. Both are rated 1 MPa at 23°C; minimum bend radii (US/UE) are 20/17 mm. Apply temperature derating and the lowest component limit; avoid solvents, corrosive media and prolonged sunlight.Weight reference 2726 g. Estimated reference based on the catalog’s corresponding standard cylinder; configuration differences have not been independently weighed. This is not a packed shipping weight.

  Read more less

  $263.04

  View options

Show more products